6528b6a8f5f659621ad3eb5233c34e2fdedf143a
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item common
1096 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097 link.
1098
1099 @item defs
1100 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1101 shared libraries are still allowed.
1102
1103 @item execstack
1104 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
1106 @item global
1107 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
1111 @item initfirst
1112 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117 objects.
1118
1119 @item interpose
1120 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121 but the primary executable.
1122
1123 @item lazy
1124 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127 Lazy binding is the default.
1128
1129 @item loadfltr
1130 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131 runtime.
1132
1133 @item muldefs
1134 Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136 @item nocombreloc
1137 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
1139 @item nocommon
1140 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141 link.
1142
1143 @item nocopyreloc
1144 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1146
1147 @item nodefaultlib
1148 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149 ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151 @item nodelete
1152 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154 @item nodlopen
1155 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157 @item nodump
1158 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
1160 @item noexecstack
1161 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
1163 @item text
1164 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166 @item notext
1167 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169 @item textoff
1170 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
1172 @item norelro
1173 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
1175 @item now
1176 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180 first called.
1181
1182 @item origin
1183 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
1185 @item relro
1186 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
1188 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
1194 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1195 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
1199 @item bndplt
1200 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
1202 @item noextern-protected-data
1203 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1207 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1208 i386 and x86-64.
1209
1210 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211 Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212 This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213 dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214 Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
1216 @item noreloc-overflow
1217 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
1221 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
1235 @end table
1236
1237 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1238
1239 @kindex -(
1240 @cindex groups of archives
1241 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1242 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253 resolved.
1254
1255 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257 more archives.
1258
1259 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1264 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1265 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269 restore the old behaviour.
1270
1271 @kindex --as-needed
1272 @kindex --no-as-needed
1273 @item --as-needed
1274 @itemx --no-as-needed
1275 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1276 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1277 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1279 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1280 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1282 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1284 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1288
1289 @kindex --add-needed
1290 @kindex --no-add-needed
1291 @item --add-needed
1292 @itemx --no-add-needed
1293 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1297
1298 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1300 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302 @kindex -Bdynamic
1303 @kindex -dy
1304 @kindex -call_shared
1305 @item -Bdynamic
1306 @itemx -dy
1307 @itemx -call_shared
1308 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1313 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1314
1315 @kindex -Bgroup
1316 @item -Bgroup
1317 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1320 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1322
1323 @kindex -Bstatic
1324 @kindex -dn
1325 @kindex -non_shared
1326 @kindex -static
1327 @item -Bstatic
1328 @itemx -dn
1329 @itemx -non_shared
1330 @itemx -static
1331 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1335 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1336 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1340 libraries.
1341
1342 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1343 @item -Bsymbolic
1344 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1347 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1352
1353 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1356 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1357 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1360 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1361 libraries and position independent executables.
1362
1363 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371 which support shared libraries.
1372
1373 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
1376 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377 @item --dynamic-list-data
1378 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
1385 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
1389 @kindex --check-sections
1390 @kindex --no-check-sections
1391 @item --check-sections
1392 @itemx --no-check-sections
1393 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1394 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1395 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1398 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1399 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401 option.
1402
1403 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1407 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1408 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1409 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1410 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1411 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1412 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1413 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1415
1416 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1417 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1423 symbols.
1424
1425 @cindex cross reference table
1426 @kindex --cref
1427 @item --cref
1428 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1436 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438 symbol are listed.
1439
1440 @cindex common allocation
1441 @kindex --no-define-common
1442 @item --no-define-common
1443 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
1458 @cindex symbols, from command line
1459 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1461 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1468 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1471
1472 @cindex demangling, from command line
1473 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1474 @kindex --no-demangle
1475 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1476 @itemx --no-demangle
1477 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1481 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1484 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1486
1487 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1488 @kindex -I@var{file}
1489 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490 @item -I@var{file}
1491 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1492 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495 doing.
1496
1497 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1499 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
1504 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1505 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1506 @item --fatal-warnings
1507 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1510
1511 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512 @item --force-exe-suffix
1513 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522 @kindex --gc-sections
1523 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1524 @cindex garbage collection
1525 @item --gc-sections
1526 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1527 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1528 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1529 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1530 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1533
1534 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
1544 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1545 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1546 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
1549 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1550 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551 @cindex garbage collection
1552 @item --print-gc-sections
1553 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559 line.
1560
1561 @kindex --print-output-format
1562 @cindex output format
1563 @item --print-output-format
1564 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
1568 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1569 @cindex memory usage
1570 @item --print-memory-usage
1571 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577 @smallexample
1578 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581 @end smallexample
1582
1583 @cindex help
1584 @cindex usage
1585 @kindex --help
1586 @item --help
1587 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
1589 @kindex --target-help
1590 @item --target-help
1591 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
1593 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1595 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1596 @option{-M} option, above.
1597
1598 @cindex memory usage
1599 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1600 @item --no-keep-memory
1601 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1603 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1604 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1605 while linking a large executable.
1606
1607 @kindex --no-undefined
1608 @kindex -z defs
1609 @item --no-undefined
1610 @itemx -z defs
1611 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1615 libraries being linked in.
1616
1617 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618 @kindex -z muldefs
1619 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1620 @itemx -z muldefs
1621 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623 first definition will be used.
1624
1625 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1626 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1627 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1628 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1629 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1630 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
1635 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638 a shared library.
1639
1640 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641 libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643 @itemize @bullet
1644 @item
1645 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647 resolvable at load time.
1648 @item
1649 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655 appropriate memset function.
1656 @end itemize
1657
1658 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1659 @item --no-undefined-version
1660 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662 will be issued instead.
1663
1664 @kindex --default-symver
1665 @item --default-symver
1666 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1667 exported symbols.
1668
1669 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1670 @item --default-imported-symver
1671 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672 imported symbols.
1673
1674 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1676 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1677 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1679 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1680 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682 inappropriate.
1683
1684 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
1689 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1690 @item --no-whole-archive
1691 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1692 archive files.
1693
1694 @cindex output file after errors
1695 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696 @item --noinhibit-exec
1697 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
1702 @kindex -nostdlib
1703 @item -nostdlib
1704 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
1708 @ifclear SingleFormat
1709 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1711 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1713 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1714 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1716 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722 @end ifclear
1723
1724 @kindex --out-implib
1725 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1726 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1727 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1728 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1729 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1730 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1731 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1732 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1733
1734 @kindex -pie
1735 @kindex --pic-executable
1736 @item -pie
1737 @itemx --pic-executable
1738 @cindex position independent executables
1739 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1740 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1741 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1742 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1743 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1744 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1745
1746 @kindex -qmagic
1747 @item -qmagic
1748 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1749
1750 @kindex -Qy
1751 @item -Qy
1752 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1753
1754 @kindex --relax
1755 @cindex synthesizing linker
1756 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1757 @cindex --no-relax
1758 @item --relax
1759 @itemx --no-relax
1760 An option with machine dependent effects.
1761 @ifset GENERIC
1762 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1763 @end ifset
1764 @ifset H8300
1765 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1766 @end ifset
1767 @ifset I960
1768 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1769 @end ifset
1770 @ifset XTENSA
1771 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1772 @end ifset
1773 @ifset M68HC11
1774 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1775 @end ifset
1776 @ifset NIOSII
1777 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1778 @end ifset
1779 @ifset POWERPC
1780 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1781 @end ifset
1782
1783 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1784 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1785 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1786 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1787 instructions, and combining constant values.
1788
1789 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1790 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1791 @ifset GENERIC
1792 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1793 family of processors.
1794 @end ifset
1795
1796 @ifset GENERIC
1797 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1798 but ignored.
1799 @end ifset
1800
1801 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1802 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1803
1804 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1805 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1806 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1807 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1808 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1809 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1810 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1811 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1812 @ifset GENERIC
1813 (such as VxWorks)
1814 @end ifset
1815 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1816 run-time memory.
1817
1818 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1819 or symbols needed for relocations.
1820
1821 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1822 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1823
1824 @ifset GENERIC
1825 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1826 @cindex runtime library search path
1827 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1828 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1829 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1830 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1831 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1832 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1833 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1834 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1835 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1836 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1837
1838 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1839 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1840 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1841 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1842 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1843 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1844 file systems.
1845
1846 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1847 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1848 the @option{-rpath} option.
1849 @end ifset
1850
1851 @ifset GENERIC
1852 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1853 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1854 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1855 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1856 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1857 of the input files.
1858
1859 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1860 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1861 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1862 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1863 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1864 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1865 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1866 appearing multiple times.
1867
1868 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1869 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1870 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1871 runtime linker would do.
1872
1873 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1874 libraries:
1875 @enumerate
1876 @item
1877 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1878 @item
1879 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1880 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1881 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1882 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1883 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1884 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1885 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1886 @item
1887 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1888 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1889 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1890 @item
1891 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1892 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1893 @item
1894 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1895 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1896 @item
1897 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1898 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1899 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1900 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1901 @item
1902 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1903 @item
1904 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1905 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1906 @end enumerate
1907
1908 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1909 warning and continue with the link.
1910 @end ifset
1911
1912 @kindex -shared
1913 @kindex -Bshareable
1914 @item -shared
1915 @itemx -Bshareable
1916 @cindex shared libraries
1917 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1918 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1919 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1920 undefined symbols in the link.
1921
1922 @kindex --sort-common
1923 @item --sort-common
1924 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1925 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1926 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1927 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1928 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1929 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1930 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1931 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1932
1933 @kindex --sort-section=name
1934 @item --sort-section=name
1935 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1936 patterns in the linker script.
1937
1938 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1939 @item --sort-section=alignment
1940 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1941 patterns in the linker script.
1942
1943 @kindex --split-by-file
1944 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1945 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1946 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1947 size of 1 if not given.
1948
1949 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1950 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1951 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1952 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1953 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1954 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1955 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1956 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1957 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1958 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1959 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1960 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1961
1962 @kindex --stats
1963 @item --stats
1964 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1965 as execution time and memory usage.
1966
1967 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1968 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1969 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1970 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1971 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1972
1973 @kindex --traditional-format
1974 @cindex traditional format
1975 @item --traditional-format
1976 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1977 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1978 use the traditional format instead.
1979
1980 @cindex dbx
1981 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1982 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1983 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1984 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1985 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1986 combine duplicate entries.
1987
1988 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1989 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1990 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1991 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1992 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1993 line.
1994 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1995 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1996 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1997 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1998 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1999
2000 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2001 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2002 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2003 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2004 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2005 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2006 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2007 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2008 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2009
2010 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2011 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2012 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2013 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2014 byte of the text segment.
2015
2016 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2017 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2018 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2019 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2020 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2021 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2022
2023 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2024 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2025 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2026 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2027 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2028
2029 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2030 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2031 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2032 values for @samp{method}:
2033
2034 @table @samp
2035 @item ignore-all
2036 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2037
2038 @item report-all
2039 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2040
2041 @item ignore-in-object-files
2042 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2043 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2044
2045 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2046 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2047 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2048 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2049 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2050 command line.
2051 @end table
2052
2053 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2054 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2055
2056 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2057 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2058 can change this to a warning.
2059
2060 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2061 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2062 @item --dll-verbose
2063 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2064 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2065 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2066 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2067 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2068
2069 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2070 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2071 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2072 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2073 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2074 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2075 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2076 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2077 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2078 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2079 @xref{WIN32}.
2080
2081 @kindex --warn-common
2082 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2083 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2084 @item --warn-common
2085 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2086 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2087 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2088 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2089 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2090 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2091
2092 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2093
2094 @table @samp
2095 @item int i = 1;
2096 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2097 file.
2098
2099 @item extern int i;
2100 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2101 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2102 variable somewhere.
2103
2104 @item int i;
2105 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2106 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2107 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2108 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2109 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2110 a definition of the same variable.
2111 @end table
2112
2113 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2114 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2115 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2116 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2117 a common symbol.
2118
2119 @enumerate
2120 @item
2121 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2122 definition for the symbol.
2123 @smallexample
2124 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2125 overridden by definition
2126 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2127 @end smallexample
2128
2129 @item
2130 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2131 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2132 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2133 @smallexample
2134 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2135 overriding common
2136 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2137 @end smallexample
2138
2139 @item
2140 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2141 @smallexample
2142 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2143 of `@var{symbol}'
2144 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2145 @end smallexample
2146
2147 @item
2148 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2149 @smallexample
2150 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2151 overridden by larger common
2152 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2153 @end smallexample
2154
2155 @item
2156 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2157 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2158 encountered in a different order.
2159 @smallexample
2160 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2161 overriding smaller common
2162 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2163 @end smallexample
2164 @end enumerate
2165
2166 @kindex --warn-constructors
2167 @item --warn-constructors
2168 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2169 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2170 detect the use of global constructors.
2171
2172 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2173 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2174 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2175 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2176 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2177 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2178 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2179 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2180 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2181 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2182 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2183 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2184 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2185
2186 @kindex --warn-once
2187 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2188 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2189 @item --warn-once
2190 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2191 which refers to it.
2192
2193 @kindex --warn-section-align
2194 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2195 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2196 @item --warn-section-align
2197 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2198 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2199 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2200 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2201 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2202
2203 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2204 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2205 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2206
2207 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2208 @item --warn-alternate-em
2209 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2210
2211 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2212 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2213 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2214 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2215 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2216
2217 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2218 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2219 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2220 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2221
2222 @kindex --whole-archive
2223 @cindex including an entire archive
2224 @item --whole-archive
2225 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2226 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2227 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2228 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2229 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2230 library. This option may be used more than once.
2231
2232 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2233 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2234 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2235 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2236 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2237
2238 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2239 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2240 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2241 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2242 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2243 @var{symbol}.
2244
2245 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2246 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2247 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2248 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2249
2250 Here is a trivial example:
2251
2252 @smallexample
2253 void *
2254 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2255 @{
2256 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2257 return __real_malloc (c);
2258 @}
2259 @end smallexample
2260
2261 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2262 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2263 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2264 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2265
2266 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2267 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2268 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2269 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2270 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2271
2272 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2273 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2274 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2275 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2276 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2277 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2278 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2279
2280 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2281 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2282 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2283 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2284 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2285
2286 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2287 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2288 @item --enable-new-dtags
2289 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2290 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2291 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2292 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2293 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2294 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2295 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2296 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2297
2298 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2299 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2300 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2301 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2302 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2303 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2304 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2305
2306 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2307 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2308 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2309 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2310 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2311 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2312 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2313
2314 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2315 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2316 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2317 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2318 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2319 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2320 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2321 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2322 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2323 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2324 compress DWARF debug sections.
2325 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2326 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2327 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2328 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2329 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2330 The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2331 the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2332 determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2333
2334 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2335 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2336 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2337 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2338 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2339 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2340
2341 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2342 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2343 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2344 has been used.
2345
2346 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2347 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2348
2349 @kindex --build-id
2350 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2351 @item --build-id
2352 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2353 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2354 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2355 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2356 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2357 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2358 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2359 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2360 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2361 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2362 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2363
2364 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2365 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2366 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2367 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2368 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2369 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2370
2371 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2372 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2373 @end table
2374
2375 @c man end
2376
2377 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2378
2379 @c man begin OPTIONS
2380
2381 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2382 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2383 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2384 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2385 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2386 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2387 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2388 object file).
2389
2390 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2391 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2392 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2393 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2394
2395 @table @gcctabopt
2396
2397 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2398 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2399 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2400 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2401 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2402
2403 @kindex --base-file
2404 @item --base-file @var{file}
2405 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2406 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2407 @file{dlltool}.
2408 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2409
2410 @kindex --dll
2411 @item --dll
2412 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2413 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2414 file.
2415 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2416
2417 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2418 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2419 @item --enable-long-section-names
2420 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2421 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2422 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2423 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2424 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2425 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2426 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2427 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2428 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2429 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2430 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2431 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2432 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2433 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2434 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2435 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2436 image and not stripping symbols.
2437 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2438
2439 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2440 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2441 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2442 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2443 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2444 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2445 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2446 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2447 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2448 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2449 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2450 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2451 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2452 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2453 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2454 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2455 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2456 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2457
2458 @kindex --leading-underscore
2459 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2460 @item --leading-underscore
2461 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2462 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2463 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2464 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2465
2466 @cindex DLLs, creating
2467 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2468 @item --export-all-symbols
2469 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2470 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2471 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2472 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2473 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2474 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2475 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2476 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2477 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2478 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2479 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2480 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2481 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2482 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2483 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2484 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2485 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2486 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2487 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2488 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2489 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2490 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2491 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2492
2493 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2494 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2495 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2496 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2500 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2501 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2502 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2503
2504 @kindex --file-alignment
2505 @item --file-alignment
2506 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2507 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2508 512.
2509 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2510
2511 @cindex heap size
2512 @kindex --heap
2513 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2514 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2515 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2516 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2517 committed.
2518 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2519
2520 @cindex image base
2521 @kindex --image-base
2522 @item --image-base @var{value}
2523 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2524 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2525 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2526 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2527 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2528 for dlls.
2529 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2530
2531 @kindex --kill-at
2532 @item --kill-at
2533 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2534 symbols before they are exported.
2535 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2536
2537 @kindex --large-address-aware
2538 @item --large-address-aware
2539 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2540 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2541 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2542 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2543 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2544 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2545
2546 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2547 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2548 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2549 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2550 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2551 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2552 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2553
2554 @kindex --major-image-version
2555 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2556 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2557 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2558
2559 @kindex --major-os-version
2560 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2561 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2562 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2565 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2566 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2567 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2568
2569 @kindex --minor-image-version
2570 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2571 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2572 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2573
2574 @kindex --minor-os-version
2575 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2576 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2577 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2578
2579 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2580 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2581 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @cindex DEF files, creating
2585 @cindex DLLs, creating
2586 @kindex --output-def
2587 @item --output-def @var{file}
2588 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2589 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2590 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2591 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2592 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2593 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2594
2595 @cindex DLLs, creating
2596 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2597 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2598 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2599 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2600 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2601 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2602 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2603 execution are avoided.
2604 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2605
2606 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2607 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2608 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2609 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2610 default.
2611 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2612
2613 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2614 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2615 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2616 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2617 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2618 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2619 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2620 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2621 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2622 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2623
2624 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2625 @item --enable-auto-import
2626 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2627 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2628 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2629 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2630 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2631 specification published by Microsoft.
2632
2633 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2634 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2635 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2636 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2637 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2638
2639 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2640 see this message:
2641
2642 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2643 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2644
2645 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2646 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2647 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2648 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2649 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2650 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2651 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2652 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2653 the warning, and exit.
2654
2655 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2656 data type of the exported variable:
2657
2658 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2659 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2660 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2661
2662 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2663 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2664 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2665 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2666
2667 @example
2668 extern type extern_array[];
2669 extern_array[1] -->
2670 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2671 @end example
2672
2673 or
2674
2675 @example
2676 extern type extern_array[];
2677 extern_array[1] -->
2678 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2679 @end example
2680
2681 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2682 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2683
2684 @example
2685 extern struct s extern_struct;
2686 extern_struct.field -->
2687 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2688 @end example
2689
2690 or
2691
2692 @example
2693 extern long long extern_ll;
2694 extern_ll -->
2695 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2696 @end example
2697
2698 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2699 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2700 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2701 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2702 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2703 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2704 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2705 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2706
2707 Original:
2708 @example
2709 --foo.h
2710 extern int arr[];
2711 --foo.c
2712 #include "foo.h"
2713 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2714 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2715 @}
2716 @end example
2717
2718 Solution 1:
2719 @example
2720 --foo.h
2721 extern int arr[];
2722 --foo.c
2723 #include "foo.h"
2724 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2725 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2726 volatile int *parr = arr;
2727 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2728 @}
2729 @end example
2730
2731 Solution 2:
2732 @example
2733 --foo.h
2734 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2735 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2736 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2737 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2738 #else
2739 #define FOO_IMPORT
2740 #endif
2741 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2742 --foo.c
2743 #include "foo.h"
2744 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2745 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2746 @}
2747 @end example
2748
2749 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2750 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2751 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2752 functions).
2753 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2756 @item --disable-auto-import
2757 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2758 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2759 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2760
2761 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2762 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2763 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2764 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2765 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2766 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2767 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2768
2769 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2770 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2771 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2772 DLLs.
2773 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2774
2775 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2776 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2777 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2778 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2779
2780 @kindex --section-alignment
2781 @item --section-alignment
2782 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2783 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2784 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2785
2786 @cindex stack size
2787 @kindex --stack
2788 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2789 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2790 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2791 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2792 committed.
2793 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2794
2795 @kindex --subsystem
2796 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2797 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2798 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2799 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2800 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2801 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2802 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2803 @var{which}.
2804 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2805
2806 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2807 of the PE file header:
2808 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2809
2810 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2811 @item --high-entropy-va
2812 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2813 (ASLR).
2814
2815 @kindex --dynamicbase
2816 @item --dynamicbase
2817 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2818 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2819 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2820
2821 @kindex --forceinteg
2822 @item --forceinteg
2823 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2824
2825 @kindex --nxcompat
2826 @item --nxcompat
2827 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2828 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2829
2830 @kindex --no-isolation
2831 @item --no-isolation
2832 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2833
2834 @kindex --no-seh
2835 @item --no-seh
2836 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2837 this image.
2838
2839 @kindex --no-bind
2840 @item --no-bind
2841 Do not bind this image.
2842
2843 @kindex --wdmdriver
2844 @item --wdmdriver
2845 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2846
2847 @kindex --tsaware
2848 @item --tsaware
2849 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2850
2851 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2852 @item --insert-timestamp
2853 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2854 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2855 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2856 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2857 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2858 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2859 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2860 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2861 identically.
2862 @end table
2863
2864 @c man end
2865
2866 @ifset C6X
2867 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2868
2869 @c man begin OPTIONS
2870
2871 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2872 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2873 all executables use an index of 0.
2874
2875 @table @gcctabopt
2876
2877 @kindex --dsbt-size
2878 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2879 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2880 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2881 entries.
2882
2883 @kindex --dsbt-index
2884 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2885 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2886 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2887 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2888 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2889
2890 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2891 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2892 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2893
2894 @end table
2895
2896 @c man end
2897 @end ifset
2898
2899 @ifset M68HC11
2900 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2901
2902 @c man begin OPTIONS
2903
2904 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2905 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2906
2907 @table @gcctabopt
2908
2909 @kindex --no-trampoline
2910 @item --no-trampoline
2911 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2912 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2913 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2914
2915 @kindex --bank-window
2916 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2917 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2918 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2919 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2920 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2921
2922 @end table
2923
2924 @c man end
2925 @end ifset
2926
2927 @ifset M68K
2928 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2929
2930 @c man begin OPTIONS
2931
2932 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2933 when linking for 68K targets.
2934
2935 @table @gcctabopt
2936
2937 @kindex --got
2938 @item --got=@var{type}
2939 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2940 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2941 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2942 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2943
2944 @end table
2945
2946 @c man end
2947 @end ifset
2948
2949 @ifset MIPS
2950 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2951
2952 @c man begin OPTIONS
2953
2954 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2955 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2956
2957 @table @gcctabopt
2958
2959 @kindex --insn32
2960 @item --insn32
2961 @kindex --no-insn32
2962 @itemx --no-insn32
2963 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2964 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2965 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2966 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2967 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2968 possible.
2969
2970 @end table
2971
2972 @c man end
2973 @end ifset
2974
2975 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2976 @node Environment
2977 @section Environment Variables
2978
2979 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2980
2981 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2982 @ifclear SingleFormat
2983 @code{GNUTARGET},
2984 @end ifclear
2985 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2986
2987 @ifclear SingleFormat
2988 @kindex GNUTARGET
2989 @cindex default input format
2990 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2991 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2992 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2993 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2994 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2995 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2996 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2997 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2998 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2999 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3000 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3001 @end ifclear
3002
3003 @kindex LDEMULATION
3004 @cindex default emulation
3005 @cindex emulation, default
3006 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3007 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3008 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3009 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3010 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3011 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3012 linker was configured.
3013
3014 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3015 @cindex demangling, default
3016 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3017 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3018 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3019 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3020 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3021 options.
3022
3023 @c man end
3024 @end ifset
3025
3026 @node Scripts
3027 @chapter Linker Scripts
3028
3029 @cindex scripts
3030 @cindex linker scripts
3031 @cindex command files
3032 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3033 written in the linker command language.
3034
3035 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3036 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3037 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3038 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3039 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3040 described below.
3041
3042 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3043 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3044 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3045 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3046 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3047
3048 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3049 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3050 default linker script.
3051
3052 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3053 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3054 Linker Scripts}.
3055
3056 @menu
3057 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3058 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3059 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3060 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3061 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3062 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3063 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3064 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3065 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3066 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3067 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3068 @end menu
3069
3070 @node Basic Script Concepts
3071 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3072 @cindex linker script concepts
3073 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3074 describe the linker script language.
3075
3076 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3077 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3078 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3079 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3080 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3081 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3082 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3083 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3084
3085 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3086 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3087 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3088 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3089 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3090 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3091 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3092 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3093 of debugging information.
3094
3095 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3096 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3097 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3098 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3099 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3100 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3101 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3102 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3103 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3104 RAM address would be the VMA.
3105
3106 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3107 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3108
3109 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3110 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3111 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3112 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3113 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3114 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3115 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3116
3117 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3118 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3119 option.
3120
3121 @node Script Format
3122 @section Linker Script Format
3123 @cindex linker script format
3124 Linker scripts are text files.
3125
3126 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3127 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3128 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3129 generally ignored.
3130
3131 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3132 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3133 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3134 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3135 file name.
3136
3137 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3138 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3139 to whitespace.
3140
3141 @node Simple Example
3142 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3143 @cindex linker script example
3144 @cindex example of linker script
3145 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3146
3147 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3148 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3149 memory layout of the output file.
3150
3151 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3152 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3153 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3154 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3155 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3156 your input files.
3157
3158 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3159 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3160 linker script which will do that:
3161 @smallexample
3162 SECTIONS
3163 @{
3164 . = 0x10000;
3165 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3166 . = 0x8000000;
3167 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3168 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3169 @}
3170 @end smallexample
3171
3172 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3173 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3174 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3175
3176 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3177 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3178 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3179 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3180 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3181 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3182 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3183
3184 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3185 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3186 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3187 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3188 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3189 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3190
3191 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3192 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3193 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3194
3195 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3196 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3197 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3198 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3199 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3200 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3201 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3202
3203 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3204 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3205 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3206 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3207 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3208 sections.
3209
3210 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3211
3212 @node Simple Commands
3213 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3214 @cindex linker script simple commands
3215 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3216
3217 @menu
3218 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3219 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3220 @ifclear SingleFormat
3221 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3222 @end ifclear
3223
3224 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3225 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3226 @end menu
3227
3228 @node Entry Point
3229 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3230 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3231 @cindex start of execution
3232 @cindex first instruction
3233 @cindex entry point
3234 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3235 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3236 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3237 @smallexample
3238 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3239 @end smallexample
3240
3241 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3242 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3243 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3244 @itemize @bullet
3245 @item
3246 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3247 @item
3248 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3249 @item
3250 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3251 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3252 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3253 @item
3254 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3255 @item
3256 The address @code{0}.
3257 @end itemize
3258
3259 @node File Commands
3260 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3261 @cindex linker script file commands
3262 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3263
3264 @table @code
3265 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3266 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3267 @cindex including a linker script
3268 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3269 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3270 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3271 10 levels deep.
3272
3273 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3274 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3275
3276 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3277 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3278 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3279 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3280 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3281 @cindex linker script input object files
3282 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3283 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3284
3285 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3286 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3287 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3288
3289 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3290 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3291
3292 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3293 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3294 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3295 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3296 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3297 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3298 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3299 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3300 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3301
3302 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3303 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3304 @samp{-l}.
3305
3306 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3307 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3308 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3309
3310 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3311 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3312 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3313 @cindex grouping input files
3314 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3315 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3316 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3317 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3318
3319 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3320 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3321 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3322 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3323 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3324 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3325 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3326 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3327 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3328 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3329 setting afterwards.
3330
3331 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3332 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3333 @cindex output file name in linker script
3334 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3335 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3336 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3337 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3338 precedence.
3339
3340 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3341 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3342
3343 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3344 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3345 @cindex library search path in linker script
3346 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3347 @cindex search path in linker script
3348 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3349 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3350 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3351 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3352 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3353 the command line option are searched first.
3354
3355 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3356 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3357 @cindex first input file
3358 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3359 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3360 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3361 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3362 first file.
3363 @end table
3364
3365 @ifclear SingleFormat
3366 @node Format Commands
3367 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3368 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3369
3370 @table @code
3371 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3372 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3373 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3374 @cindex output file format in linker script
3375 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3376 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3377 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3378 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3379 line option takes precedence.
3380
3381 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3382 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3383 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3384 desired endianness.
3385
3386 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3387 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3388 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3389 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3390
3391 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3392 command:
3393 @smallexample
3394 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3395 @end smallexample
3396 This says that the default format for the output file is
3397 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3398 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3399 format.
3400
3401 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3402 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3403 @cindex input file format in linker script
3404 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3405 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3406 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3407 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3408 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3409 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3410 @end table
3411 @end ifclear
3412
3413 @node REGION_ALIAS
3414 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3415 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3416 @cindex region alias
3417 @cindex region names
3418
3419 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3420 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3421
3422 @smallexample
3423 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3424 @end smallexample
3425
3426 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3427 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3428 to memory regions. An example follows.
3429
3430 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3431 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3432 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3433 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3434 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3435 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3436 sections:
3437
3438 @itemize @bullet
3439 @item
3440 @code{.text} program code;
3441 @item
3442 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3443 @item
3444 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3445 @item
3446 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3447 @end itemize
3448
3449 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3450 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3451 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3452 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3453 @code{C}:
3454 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3455 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3456 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3457 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3458 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3459 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3460 @end multitable
3461 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3462 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3463 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3464 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3465
3466 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3467 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3468 memory layout:
3469 @smallexample
3470 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3471
3472 SECTIONS
3473 @{
3474 .text :
3475 @{
3476 *(.text)
3477 @} > REGION_TEXT
3478 .rodata :
3479 @{
3480 *(.rodata)
3481 rodata_end = .;
3482 @} > REGION_RODATA
3483 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3484 @{
3485 data_start = .;
3486 *(.data)
3487 @} > REGION_DATA
3488 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3489 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3490 .bss :
3491 @{
3492 *(.bss)
3493 @} > REGION_BSS
3494 @}
3495 @end smallexample
3496
3497 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3498 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3499 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3500 @table @code
3501 @item A
3502 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3503 @smallexample
3504 MEMORY
3505 @{
3506 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3507 @}
3508
3509 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3510 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3511 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3512 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3513 @end smallexample
3514 @item B
3515 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3516 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3517 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3518 @smallexample
3519 MEMORY
3520 @{
3521 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3522 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3523 @}
3524
3525 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3526 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3527 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3528 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3529 @end smallexample
3530 @item C
3531 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3532 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3533 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3534 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3535 @smallexample
3536 MEMORY
3537 @{
3538 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3539 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3540 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3541 @}
3542
3543 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3544 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3545 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3546 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3547 @end smallexample
3548 @end table
3549
3550 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3551 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3552 necessary:
3553 @smallexample
3554 #include <string.h>
3555
3556 extern char data_start [];
3557 extern char data_size [];
3558 extern char data_load_start [];
3559
3560 void copy_data(void)
3561 @{
3562 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3563 @{
3564 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3565 @}
3566 @}
3567 @end smallexample
3568
3569 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3570 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3571 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3572
3573 @table @code
3574 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3575 @kindex ASSERT
3576 @cindex assertion in linker script
3577 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3578 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3579
3580 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3581 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3582 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3583 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3584 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3585
3586 @smallexample
3587 .stack :
3588 @{
3589 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3590 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3591 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3592 @}
3593 @end smallexample
3594
3595 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3596 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3597 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3598
3599 @smallexample
3600 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3601 .stack :
3602 @{
3603 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3604 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3605 @}
3606 @end smallexample
3607
3608 will work.
3609
3610 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3611 @kindex EXTERN
3612 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3613 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3614 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3615 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3616 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3617 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3618
3619 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3620 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3621 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3622 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3623 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3624 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3625
3626 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3627 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3628 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3629 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3630 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3631 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3632
3633 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3634 @kindex INSERT
3635 @cindex insert user script into default script
3636 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3637 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3638 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3639 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3640 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3641 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3642 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3643 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3644 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3645 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3646 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3647 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3648 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3649
3650 @smallexample
3651 SECTIONS
3652 @{
3653 OVERLAY :
3654 @{
3655 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3656 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3657 @}
3658 @}
3659 INSERT AFTER .text;
3660 @end smallexample
3661
3662 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3663 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3664 @cindex cross references
3665 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3666 references among certain output sections.
3667
3668 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3669 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3670 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3671 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3672 a function defined in the other section.
3673
3674 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3675 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3676 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3677 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3678 names.
3679
3680 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3681 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3682 @cindex cross references
3683 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3684 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3685
3686 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3687 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3688 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3689 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3690 must never call back.
3691
3692 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3693 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3694 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3695 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3696 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3697 names, not input section names.
3698
3699 @ifclear SingleFormat
3700 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3701 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3702 @cindex machine architecture
3703 @cindex architecture
3704 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3705 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3706 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3707 the @samp{-f} option.
3708 @end ifclear
3709
3710 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3711 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3712 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3713 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3714 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3715 @xref{Expression Section}.
3716 @end table
3717
3718 @node Assignments
3719 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3720 @cindex assignment in scripts
3721 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3722 @cindex variables, defining
3723 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3724 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3725
3726 @menu
3727 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3728 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3729 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3730 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3731 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3732 @end menu
3733
3734 @node Simple Assignments
3735 @subsection Simple Assignments
3736
3737 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3738
3739 @table @code
3740 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3741 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3742 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3743 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3744 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3745 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3746 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3747 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3748 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3749 @end table
3750
3751 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3752 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3753 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3754
3755 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3756 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3757
3758 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3759
3760 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3761
3762 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3763 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3764 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3765
3766 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3767 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3768
3769 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3770 assignments may be used:
3771
3772 @smallexample
3773 floating_point = 0;
3774 SECTIONS
3775 @{
3776 .text :
3777 @{
3778 *(.text)
3779 _etext = .;
3780 @}
3781 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3782 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3783 @}
3784 @end smallexample
3785 @noindent
3786 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3787 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3788 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3789 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3790 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3791
3792 @node HIDDEN
3793 @subsection HIDDEN
3794 @cindex HIDDEN
3795 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3796 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3797
3798 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3799 @code{HIDDEN}:
3800
3801 @smallexample
3802 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3803 SECTIONS
3804 @{
3805 .text :
3806 @{
3807 *(.text)
3808 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3809 @}
3810 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3811 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3812 @}
3813 @end smallexample
3814 @noindent
3815 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3816
3817 @node PROVIDE
3818 @subsection PROVIDE
3819 @cindex PROVIDE
3820 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3821 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3822 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3823 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3824 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3825 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3826 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3827 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3828
3829 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3830 @smallexample
3831 SECTIONS
3832 @{
3833 .text :
3834 @{
3835 *(.text)
3836 _etext = .;
3837 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3838 @}
3839 @}
3840 @end smallexample
3841
3842 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3843 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3844 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3845 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3846 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3847 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3848
3849 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3850 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3851 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3852 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3853 hidden and won't be exported.
3854
3855 @node Source Code Reference
3856 @subsection Source Code Reference
3857
3858 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3859 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3860 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3861 symbol that does not have a value.
3862
3863 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3864 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3865 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3866 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3867 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3868 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3869 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3870 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3871
3872 @smallexample
3873 extern int foo;
3874 @end smallexample
3875
3876 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3877
3878 @smallexample
3879 _foo = 1000;
3880 @end smallexample
3881
3882 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3883 transformation has taken place.
3884
3885 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3886 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3887 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3888 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3889 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3890 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3891 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3892
3893 @smallexample
3894 int foo = 1000;
3895 @end smallexample
3896
3897 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3898 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3899 number 1000 is initially stored.
3900
3901 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3902 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3903 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3904 So:
3905
3906 @smallexample
3907 foo = 1;
3908 @end smallexample
3909
3910 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3911 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3912 address. Whereas:
3913
3914 @smallexample
3915 int * a = & foo;
3916 @end smallexample
3917
3918 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3919 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3920 the variable @samp{a}.
3921
3922 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3923 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3924 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3925
3926 @smallexample
3927 foo = 1000;
3928 @end smallexample
3929
3930 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3931 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3932 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3933 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3934 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3935
3936 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3937 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3938 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3939 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3940 linker script contains these declarations:
3941
3942 @smallexample
3943 @group
3944 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3945 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3946 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3947 @end group
3948 @end smallexample
3949
3950 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3951
3952 @smallexample
3953 @group
3954 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3955
3956 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3957 @end group
3958 @end smallexample
3959
3960 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3961 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3962 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3963
3964 @smallexample
3965 @group
3966 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3967
3968 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3969 @end group
3970 @end smallexample
3971
3972 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3973 operators.
3974
3975 @node SECTIONS
3976 @section SECTIONS Command
3977 @kindex SECTIONS
3978 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3979 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3980
3981 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3982 @smallexample
3983 SECTIONS
3984 @{
3985 @var{sections-command}
3986 @var{sections-command}
3987 @dots{}
3988 @}
3989 @end smallexample
3990
3991 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3992
3993 @itemize @bullet
3994 @item
3995 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3996 @item
3997 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3998 @item
3999 an output section description
4000 @item
4001 an overlay description
4002 @end itemize
4003
4004 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4005 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4006 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4007 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4008 the layout of the output file.
4009
4010 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4011 below.
4012
4013 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4014 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4015 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4016 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4017 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4018 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4019
4020 @menu
4021 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4022 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4023 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4024 * Input Section:: Input section description
4025 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4026 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4027 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4028 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4029 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4030 @end menu
4031
4032 @node Output Section Description
4033 @subsection Output Section Description
4034 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4035 @smallexample
4036 @group
4037 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4038 [AT(@var{lma})]
4039 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4040 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4041 [@var{constraint}]
4042 @{
4043 @var{output-section-command}
4044 @var{output-section-command}
4045 @dots{}
4046 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4047 @end group
4048 @end smallexample
4049
4050 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4051
4052 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4053 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4054 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4055 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4056 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4057
4058 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4059
4060 @itemize @bullet
4061 @item
4062 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4063 @item
4064 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4065 @item
4066 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4067 @item
4068 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4069 @end itemize
4070
4071 @node Output Section Name
4072 @subsection Output Section Name
4073 @cindex name, section
4074 @cindex section name
4075 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4076 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4077 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4078 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4079 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4080 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4081 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4082 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4083 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4084 commas must be quoted.
4085
4086 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4087 Discarding}.
4088
4089 @node Output Section Address
4090 @subsection Output Section Address
4091 @cindex address, section
4092 @cindex section address
4093 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4094 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4095 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4096
4097 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4098 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4099 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4100 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4101 contained within the output section.
4102
4103 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4104
4105 @itemize @bullet
4106 @item
4107 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4108 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4109 in that region.
4110
4111 @item
4112 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4113 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4114 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4115 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4116
4117 @item
4118 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4119 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4120 counter.
4121 @end itemize
4122
4123 @noindent
4124 For example:
4125
4126 @smallexample
4127 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4128 @end smallexample
4129
4130 @noindent
4131 and
4132
4133 @smallexample
4134 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4135 @end smallexample
4136
4137 @noindent
4138 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4139 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4140 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4141 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4142 input sections.
4143
4144 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4145 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4146 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4147 do something like this:
4148 @smallexample
4149 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4150 @end smallexample
4151 @noindent
4152 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4153 aligned upward to the specified value.
4154
4155 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4156 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4157 sections are ignored).
4158
4159 @node Input Section
4160 @subsection Input Section Description
4161 @cindex input sections
4162 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4163 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4164
4165 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4166 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4167 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4168 map the input files into your memory layout.
4169
4170 @menu
4171 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4172 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4173 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4174 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4175 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4176 @end menu
4177
4178 @node Input Section Basics
4179 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4180 @cindex input section basics
4181 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4182 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4183
4184 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4185 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4186
4187 The most common input section description is to include all input
4188 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4189 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4190 @smallexample
4191 *(.text)
4192 @end smallexample
4193 @noindent
4194 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4195 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4196 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4197 example:
4198 @smallexample
4199 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4200 @end smallexample
4201 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4202 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4203
4204 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4205 @smallexample
4206 *(.text .rdata)
4207 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4208 @end smallexample
4209 @noindent
4210 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4211 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4212 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4213 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4214 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4215 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4216
4217 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, the exclusion only
4218 applies to the section immediately following, for example:
4219 @smallexample
4220 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4221 @end smallexample
4222 @noindent
4223 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4224 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4225 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4226 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4227 should be modified to:
4228 @smallexample
4229 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4230 @end smallexample
4231
4232 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4233 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4234 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4235 @smallexample
4236 data.o(.data)
4237 @end smallexample
4238
4239 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4240 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4241
4242 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4243
4244 @smallexample
4245 @group
4246 SECTIONS @{
4247 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4248 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4249 @}
4250 @end group
4251 @end smallexample
4252
4253 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4254 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4255 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4256 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4257 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4258
4259 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4260 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4261 with no whitespace around the colon.
4262
4263 @table @samp
4264 @item archive:file
4265 matches file within archive
4266 @item archive:
4267 matches the whole archive
4268 @item :file
4269 matches file but not one in an archive
4270 @end table
4271
4272 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4273 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4274 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4275 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4276 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4277 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4278 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4279 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4280 command.
4281
4282 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4283 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4284 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4285 @smallexample
4286 data.o
4287 @end smallexample
4288
4289 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4290 and does not contain any wild card
4291 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4292 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4293 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4294 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4295 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4296 the archive search path.
4297
4298 @node Input Section Wildcards
4299 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4300 @cindex input section wildcards
4301 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4302 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4303 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4304 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4305 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4306
4307 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4308 pattern for the file name.
4309
4310 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4311
4312 @table @samp
4313 @item *
4314 matches any number of characters
4315 @item ?
4316 matches any single character
4317 @item [@var{chars}]
4318 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4319 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4320 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4321 @item \
4322 quotes the following character
4323 @end table
4324
4325 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4326 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4327 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4328 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4329 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4330 a @samp{/} character.
4331
4332 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4333 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4334 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4335
4336 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4337 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4338 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4339 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4340 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4341 @smallexample
4342 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4343 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4344 @end smallexample
4345
4346 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4347 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4348 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4349 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4350 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4351 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4352 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4353
4354 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4355 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4356 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4357 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4358 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4359 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4360
4361 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4362 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4363 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4364 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4365 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4366
4367 @cindex SORT
4368 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4369
4370 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4371 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4372
4373 @enumerate
4374 @item
4375 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4376 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4377 sections have the same name.
4378 @item
4379 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4380 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4381 sections have the same alignment.
4382 @item
4383 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4384 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4385 @item
4386 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4387 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4388 @item
4389 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4390 @end enumerate
4391
4392 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4393 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4394 takes precedence over the command line option.
4395
4396 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4397 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4398 treated as nested sorting command.
4399
4400 @enumerate
4401 @item
4402 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4403 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4404 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4405 @item
4406 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4407 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4408 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4409 @end enumerate
4410
4411 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4412 command line option will be ignored.
4413
4414 @cindex SORT_NONE
4415 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4416 section sorting option.
4417
4418 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4419 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4420 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4421
4422 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4423 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4424 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4425 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4426 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4427 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4428 @smallexample
4429 @group
4430 SECTIONS @{
4431 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4432 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4433 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4434 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4435 @}
4436 @end group
4437 @end smallexample
4438
4439 @node Input Section Common
4440 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4441 @cindex common symbol placement
4442 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4443 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4444 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4445 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4446 named @samp{COMMON}.
4447
4448 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4449 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4450 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4451 input files are placed in another section.
4452
4453 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4454 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4455 @smallexample
4456 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4457 @end smallexample
4458
4459 @cindex scommon section
4460 @cindex small common symbols
4461 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4462 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4463 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4464 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4465 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4466 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4467 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4468 locations.
4469
4470 @cindex [COMMON]
4471 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4472 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4473 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4474
4475 @node Input Section Keep
4476 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4477 @cindex KEEP
4478 @cindex garbage collection
4479 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4480 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4481 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4482 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4483 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4484
4485 @node Input Section Example
4486 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4487 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4488 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4489 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4490 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4491 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4492 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4493 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4494 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4495 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4496
4497 @smallexample
4498 @group
4499 SECTIONS @{
4500 outputa 0x10000 :
4501 @{
4502 all.o
4503 foo.o (.input1)
4504 @}
4505 @end group
4506 @group
4507 outputb :
4508 @{
4509 foo.o (.input2)
4510 foo1.o (.input1)
4511 @}
4512 @end group
4513 @group
4514 outputc :
4515 @{
4516 *(.input1)
4517 *(.input2)
4518 @}
4519 @}
4520 @end group
4521 @end smallexample
4522
4523 @node Output Section Data
4524 @subsection Output Section Data
4525 @cindex data
4526 @cindex section data
4527 @cindex output section data
4528 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4529 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4530 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4531 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4532 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4533 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4534 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4535 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4536 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4537 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4538 counter.
4539
4540 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4541 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4542 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4543 stored.
4544
4545 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4546 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4547 @smallexample
4548 BYTE(1)
4549 LONG(addr)
4550 @end smallexample
4551
4552 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4553 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4554 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4555 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4556 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4557
4558 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4559 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4560 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4561 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4562 endianness of the first input object file.
4563
4564 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4565 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4566 @smallexample
4567 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4568 @end smallexample
4569 whereas this will work:
4570 @smallexample
4571 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4572 @end smallexample
4573
4574 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4575 @cindex holes, filling
4576 @cindex unspecified memory
4577 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4578 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4579 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4580 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4581 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4582 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4583 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4584 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4585 different parts of an output section.
4586
4587 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4588 value @samp{0x90}:
4589 @smallexample
4590 FILL(0x90909090)
4591 @end smallexample
4592
4593 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4594 section attribute, but it only affects the
4595 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4596 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4597 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4598 expression.
4599
4600 @node Output Section Keywords
4601 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4602 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4603 commands.
4604
4605 @table @code
4606 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4607 @cindex input filename symbols
4608 @cindex filename symbols
4609 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4610 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4611 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4612 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4613 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4614
4615 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4616 normally used for any other object file format.
4617
4618 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4619 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4620 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4621 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4622 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4623 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4624 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4625 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4626 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4627 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4628 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4629 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4630 ignored for other object file formats.
4631
4632 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4633 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4634 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4635 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4636 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4637 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4638 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4639 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4640 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4641 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4642 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4643 @code{exit}.
4644
4645 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4646 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4647 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4648 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4649 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4650 runtime code expects to see.
4651
4652 @smallexample
4653 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4654 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4655 *(.ctors)
4656 LONG(0)
4657 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4658 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4659 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4660 *(.dtors)
4661 LONG(0)
4662 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4663 @end smallexample
4664
4665 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4666 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4667 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4668 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4669 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4670 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4671 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4672 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4673
4674 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4675 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4676 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4677 scripts.
4678
4679 @end table
4680
4681 @node Output Section Discarding
4682 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4683 @cindex discarding sections
4684 @cindex sections, discarding
4685 @cindex removing sections
4686 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4687 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4688 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4689 @smallexample
4690 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4691 @end smallexample
4692 @noindent
4693 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4694 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4695 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4696 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4697 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4698 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4699 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4700 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4701 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4702
4703 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4704 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4705 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4706 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4707 section is discarded.
4708
4709 @cindex /DISCARD/
4710 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4711 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4712 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4713
4714 @node Output Section Attributes
4715 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4716 @cindex output section attributes
4717 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4718 like this:
4719
4720 @smallexample
4721 @group
4722 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4723 [AT(@var{lma})]
4724 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4725 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4726 [@var{constraint}]
4727 @{
4728 @var{output-section-command}
4729 @var{output-section-command}
4730 @dots{}
4731 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4732 @end group
4733 @end smallexample
4734
4735 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4736 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4737 remaining section attributes.
4738
4739 @menu
4740 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4741 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4742 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4743 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4744 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4745 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4746 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4747 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4748 @end menu
4749
4750 @node Output Section Type
4751 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4752 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4753 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4754
4755 @table @code
4756 @item NOLOAD
4757 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4758 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4759 @item DSECT
4760 @itemx COPY
4761 @itemx INFO
4762 @itemx OVERLAY
4763 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4764 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4765 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4766 section when the program is run.
4767 @end table
4768
4769 @kindex NOLOAD
4770 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4771 @cindex loading, preventing
4772 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4773 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4774 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4775 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4776 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4777 @smallexample
4778 @group
4779 SECTIONS @{
4780 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4781 @dots{}
4782 @}
4783 @end group
4784 @end smallexample
4785
4786 @node Output Section LMA
4787 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4788 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4789 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4790 @cindex load address
4791 @cindex section load address
4792 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4793 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4794 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4795 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4796 address is optional.
4797
4798 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4799 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4800 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4801 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4802 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4803
4804 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4805 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4806 load address:
4807
4808 @itemize @bullet
4809 @item
4810 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4811 the LMA address as well.
4812
4813 @item
4814 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4815
4816 @item
4817 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4818 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4819 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4820 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4821 the last section in the located region.
4822
4823 @item
4824 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4825 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4826
4827 @item
4828 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4829 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4830 @end itemize
4831
4832 @cindex ROM initialized data
4833 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4834 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4835 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4836 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4837 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4838 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4839 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4840 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4841 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4842
4843 @smallexample
4844 @group
4845 SECTIONS
4846 @{
4847 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4848 .mdata 0x2000 :
4849 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4850 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4851 .bss 0x3000 :
4852 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4853 @}
4854 @end group
4855 @end smallexample
4856
4857 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4858 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4859 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4860 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4861 script.
4862
4863 @smallexample
4864 @group
4865 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4866 char *src = &_etext;
4867 char *dst = &_data;
4868
4869 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4870 while (dst < &_edata)
4871 *dst++ = *src++;
4872
4873 /* Zero bss. */
4874 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4875 *dst = 0;
4876 @end group
4877 @end smallexample
4878
4879 @node Forced Output Alignment
4880 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4881 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4882 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4883 @cindex output section alignment
4884 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4885 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4886 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4887
4888 @node Forced Input Alignment
4889 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4890 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4891 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4892 @cindex input section alignment
4893 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4894 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4895 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4896
4897 @node Output Section Constraint
4898 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4899 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4900 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4901 @cindex constraints on output sections
4902 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4903 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4904 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4905 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4906
4907 @node Output Section Region
4908 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4909 @kindex >@var{region}
4910 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4911 @cindex memory regions and sections
4912 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4913 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4914
4915 Here is a simple example:
4916 @smallexample
4917 @group
4918 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4919 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4920 @end group
4921 @end smallexample
4922
4923 @node Output Section Phdr
4924 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4925 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4926 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4927 @cindex program headers and sections
4928 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4929 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4930 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4931 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4932 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4933 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4934
4935 Here is a simple example:
4936 @smallexample
4937 @group
4938 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4939 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4940 @end group
4941 @end smallexample
4942
4943 @node Output Section Fill
4944 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4945 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4946 @cindex section fill pattern
4947 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4948 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4949 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4950 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4951 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4952 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4953 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4954 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4955 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4956 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4957 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4958 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4959 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4960
4961 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4962 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4963
4964 Here is a simple example:
4965 @smallexample
4966 @group
4967 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4968 @end group
4969 @end smallexample
4970
4971 @node Overlay Description
4972 @subsection Overlay Description
4973 @kindex OVERLAY
4974 @cindex overlays
4975 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4976 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4977 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4978 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4979 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4980 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4981 than another.
4982
4983 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4984 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4985 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4986 command is as follows:
4987 @smallexample
4988 @group
4989 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4990 @{
4991 @var{secname1}
4992 @{
4993 @var{output-section-command}
4994 @var{output-section-command}
4995 @dots{}
4996 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4997 @var{secname2}
4998 @{
4999 @var{output-section-command}
5000 @var{output-section-command}
5001 @dots{}
5002 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5003 @dots{}
5004 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5005 @end group
5006 @end smallexample
5007
5008 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5009 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5010 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5011 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5012 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5013 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5014
5015 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5016 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5017
5018 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5019 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5020 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5021 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5022 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5023 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5024
5025 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5026 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5027 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5028 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5029 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5030
5031 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5032 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5033 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5034 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5035 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5036 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5037 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5038
5039 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5040 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5041
5042 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5043 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5044 @smallexample
5045 @group
5046 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5047 @{
5048 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5049 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5050 @}
5051 @end group
5052 @end smallexample
5053 @noindent
5054 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5055 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5056 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5057 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5058 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5059 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5060
5061 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5062 like the following.
5063
5064 @smallexample
5065 @group
5066 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5067 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5068 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5069 @end group
5070 @end smallexample
5071
5072 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5073 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5074 example could have been written identically as follows.
5075
5076 @smallexample
5077 @group
5078 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5079 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5080 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5081 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5082 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5083 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5084 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5085 @end group
5086 @end smallexample
5087
5088 @node MEMORY
5089 @section MEMORY Command
5090 @kindex MEMORY
5091 @cindex memory regions
5092 @cindex regions of memory
5093 @cindex allocating memory
5094 @cindex discontinuous memory
5095 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5096 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5097
5098 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5099 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5100 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5101 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5102 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5103 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5104 around to fit into the available regions.
5105
5106 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5107 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5108 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5109 @code{MEMORY} is:
5110 @smallexample
5111 @group
5112 MEMORY
5113 @{
5114 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5115 @dots{}
5116 @}
5117 @end group
5118 @end smallexample
5119
5120 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5121 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5122 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5123 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5124 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5125 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5126 command.
5127
5128 @cindex memory region attributes
5129 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5130 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5131 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5132 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5133 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5134 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5135 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5136
5137 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5138 @table @samp
5139 @item R
5140 Read-only section
5141 @item W
5142 Read/write section
5143 @item X
5144 Executable section
5145 @item A
5146 Allocatable section
5147 @item I
5148 Initialized section
5149 @item L
5150 Same as @samp{I}
5151 @item !
5152 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5153 @end table
5154
5155 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5156 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5157 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5158 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5159 attributes.
5160
5161 @kindex ORIGIN =
5162 @kindex o =
5163 @kindex org =
5164 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5165 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5166 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5167 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5168 @code{ORG}).
5169
5170 @kindex LENGTH =
5171 @kindex len =
5172 @kindex l =
5173 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5174 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5175 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5176 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5177
5178 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5179 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5180 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5181 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5182 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5183 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5184 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5185 region.
5186
5187 @smallexample
5188 @group
5189 MEMORY
5190 @{
5191 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5192 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5193 @}
5194 @end group
5195 @end smallexample
5196
5197 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5198 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5199 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5200 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5201 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5202 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5203 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5204 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5205 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5206
5207 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5208 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5209 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5210
5211 @smallexample
5212 @group
5213 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5214 @end group
5215 @end smallexample
5216
5217 @node PHDRS
5218 @section PHDRS Command
5219 @kindex PHDRS
5220 @cindex program headers
5221 @cindex ELF program headers
5222 @cindex program segments
5223 @cindex segments, ELF
5224 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5225 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5226 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5227 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5228
5229 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5230 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5231 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5232 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5233 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5234
5235 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5236 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5237 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5238 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5239 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5240
5241 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5242 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5243 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5244
5245 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5246 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5247
5248 @smallexample
5249 @group
5250 PHDRS
5251 @{
5252 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5253 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5254 @}
5255 @end group
5256 @end smallexample
5257
5258 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5259 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5260 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5261 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5262 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5263 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5264
5265 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5266 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5267 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5268 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5269 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5270 Section Phdr}.
5271
5272 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5273 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5274 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5275 contain the section.
5276
5277 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5278 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5279 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5280 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5281 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5282 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5283 segment at all.
5284
5285 @kindex FILEHDR
5286 @kindex PHDRS
5287 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5288 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5289 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5290 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5291 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5292 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5293 these keywords.
5294
5295 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5296 value of the keyword.
5297
5298 @table @asis
5299 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5300 Indicates an unused program header.
5301
5302 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5303 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5304 the file.
5305
5306 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5307 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5308
5309 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5310 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5311 found.
5312
5313 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5314 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5315
5316 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5317 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5318 ABI.
5319
5320 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5321 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5322
5323 @item @var{expression}
5324 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5325 be used for types not defined above.
5326 @end table
5327
5328 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5329 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5330 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5331 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5332 output section attribute.
5333
5334 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5335 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5336 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5337 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5338 header.
5339
5340 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5341 headers used on a native ELF system.
5342
5343 @example
5344 @group
5345 PHDRS
5346 @{
5347 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5348 interp PT_INTERP ;
5349 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5350 data PT_LOAD ;
5351 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5352 @}
5353
5354 SECTIONS
5355 @{
5356 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5357 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5358 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5359 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5360 @dots{}
5361 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5362 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5363 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5364 @dots{}
5365 @}
5366 @end group
5367 @end example
5368
5369 @node VERSION
5370 @section VERSION Command
5371 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5372 @cindex symbol versions
5373 @cindex version script
5374 @cindex versions of symbols
5375 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5376 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5377 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5378 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5379 shared library.
5380
5381 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5382 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5383 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5384
5385 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5386 @smallexample
5387 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5388 @end smallexample
5389
5390 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5391 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5392 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5393 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5394 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5395 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5396 library.
5397
5398 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5399 examples.
5400
5401 @smallexample
5402 VERS_1.1 @{
5403 global:
5404 foo1;
5405 local:
5406 old*;
5407 original*;
5408 new*;
5409 @};
5410
5411 VERS_1.2 @{
5412 foo2;
5413 @} VERS_1.1;
5414
5415 VERS_2.0 @{
5416 bar1; bar2;
5417 extern "C++" @{
5418 ns::*;
5419 "f(int, double)";
5420 @};
5421 @} VERS_1.2;
5422 @end smallexample
5423
5424 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5425 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5426 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5427 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5428 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5429 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5430 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5431 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5432 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5433 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5434
5435 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5436 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5437 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5438
5439 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5440 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5441 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5442
5443 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5444 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5445 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5446 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5447 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5448 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5449 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5450 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5451 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5452
5453 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5454 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5455 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5456 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5457
5458 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5459 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5460 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5461 won't.
5462
5463 @smallexample
5464 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5465 @end smallexample
5466
5467 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5468 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5469 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5470 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5471 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5472 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5473 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5474 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5475 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5476 search for each symbol reference.
5477
5478 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5479 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5480 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5481 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5482 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5483 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5484 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5485 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5486 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5487
5488 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5489 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5490 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5491 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5492 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5493 @smallexample
5494 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5495 @end smallexample
5496 @noindent
5497 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5498 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5499 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5500 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5501 takes precedence over a version script.
5502
5503 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5504 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5505 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5506 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5507 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5508
5509 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5510 source file. Here is an example:
5511
5512 @smallexample
5513 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5514 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5515 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5516 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5517 @end smallexample
5518
5519 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5520 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5521 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5522 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5523
5524 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5525 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5526 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5527 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5528 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5529 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5530
5531 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5532 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5533 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5534 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5535
5536 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5537
5538 @smallexample
5539 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5540 @end smallexample
5541
5542 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5543 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5544 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5545 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5546 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5547
5548 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5549 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5550 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5551 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5552 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5553 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5554 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5555 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5556 expect when you upgrade.
5557
5558 @node Expressions
5559 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5560 @cindex expressions
5561 @cindex arithmetic
5562 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5563 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5564 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5565 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5566
5567 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5568
5569 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5570 expressions.
5571
5572 @menu
5573 * Constants:: Constants
5574 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5575 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5576 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5577 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5578 * Operators:: Operators
5579 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5580 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5581 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5582 @end menu
5583
5584 @node Constants
5585 @subsection Constants
5586 @cindex integer notation
5587 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5588 All constants are integers.
5589
5590 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5591 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5592 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5593 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5594 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5595 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5596
5597 @cindex scaled integers
5598 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5599 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5600 @cindex suffixes for integers
5601 @cindex integer suffixes
5602 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5603 constant by
5604 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5605 @ifnottex
5606 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5607 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5608 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5609 @end ifnottex
5610 @tex
5611 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5612 @end tex
5613 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5614 respectively. For example, the following
5615 all refer to the same quantity:
5616
5617 @smallexample
5618 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5619 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5620 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5621 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5622 @end smallexample
5623
5624 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5625 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5626
5627 @node Symbolic Constants
5628 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5629 @cindex symbolic constants
5630 @kindex CONSTANT
5631 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5632 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5633
5634 @table @code
5635 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5636 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5637 The target's maximum page size.
5638
5639 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5640 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5641 The target's default page size.
5642 @end table
5643
5644 So for example:
5645
5646 @smallexample
5647 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5648 @end smallexample
5649
5650 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5651 supported by the target.
5652
5653 @node Symbols
5654 @subsection Symbol Names
5655 @cindex symbol names
5656 @cindex names
5657 @cindex quoted symbol names
5658 @kindex "
5659 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5660 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5661 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5662 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5663 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5664 @smallexample
5665 "SECTION" = 9;
5666 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5667 @end smallexample
5668
5669 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5670 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5671 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5672
5673 @node Orphan Sections
5674 @subsection Orphan Sections
5675 @cindex orphan
5676 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5677 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5678 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5679 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5680 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5681 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5682 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5683 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5684 at the end of the file.
5685
5686 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5687 well as section flag.
5688
5689 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5690 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5691 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5692
5693 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5694 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5695 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5696 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5697 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5698 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5699 character.
5700
5701 @node Location Counter
5702 @subsection The Location Counter
5703 @kindex .
5704 @cindex dot
5705 @cindex location counter
5706 @cindex current output location
5707 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5708 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5709 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5710 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5711 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5712
5713 @cindex holes
5714 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5715 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5716 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5717 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5718 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5719
5720 @smallexample
5721 SECTIONS
5722 @{
5723 output :
5724 @{
5725 file1(.text)
5726 . = . + 1000;
5727 file2(.text)
5728 . += 1000;
5729 file3(.text)
5730 @} = 0x12345678;
5731 @}
5732 @end smallexample
5733 @noindent
5734 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5735 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5736 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5737 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5738 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5739 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5740
5741 @cindex dot inside sections
5742 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5743 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5744 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5745 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5746 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5747 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5748
5749 @smallexample
5750 SECTIONS
5751 @{
5752 . = 0x100
5753 .text: @{
5754 *(.text)
5755 . = 0x200
5756 @}
5757 . = 0x500
5758 .data: @{
5759 *(.data)
5760 . += 0x600
5761 @}
5762 @}
5763 @end smallexample
5764
5765 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5766 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5767 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5768 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5769 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5770 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5771 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5772 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5773
5774 @cindex dot outside sections
5775 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5776 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5777 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5778
5779 @smallexample
5780 SECTIONS
5781 @{
5782 start_of_text = . ;
5783 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5784 end_of_text = . ;
5785
5786 start_of_data = . ;
5787 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5788 end_of_data = . ;
5789 @}
5790 @end smallexample
5791
5792 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5793 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5794 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5795 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5796 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5797 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5798 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5799 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5800 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5801 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5802 as follows:
5803
5804 @smallexample
5805 SECTIONS
5806 @{
5807 start_of_text = . ;
5808 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5809 end_of_text = . ;
5810
5811 start_of_data = . ;
5812 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5813 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5814 end_of_data = . ;
5815 @}
5816 @end smallexample
5817
5818 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5819 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5820 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5821 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5822 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5823 section. So you could write:
5824
5825 @smallexample
5826 SECTIONS
5827 @{
5828 start_of_text = . ;
5829 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5830 end_of_text = . ;
5831
5832 . = . ;
5833 start_of_data = . ;
5834 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5835 end_of_data = . ;
5836 @}
5837 @end smallexample
5838
5839 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5840 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5841
5842 @need 2000
5843 @node Operators
5844 @subsection Operators
5845 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5846 @cindex arithmetic operators
5847 @cindex precedence in expressions
5848 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5849 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5850 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5851 @ifnottex
5852 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5853 @smallexample
5854 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5855 (highest)
5856 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5857 2 left * / %
5858 3 left + -
5859 4 left >> <<
5860 5 left == != > < <= >=
5861 6 left &
5862 7 left |
5863 8 left &&
5864 9 left ||
5865 10 right ? :
5866 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5867 (lowest)
5868 @end smallexample
5869 Notes:
5870 (1) Prefix operators
5871 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5872 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5873 @end ifnottex
5874 @tex
5875 \vskip \baselineskip
5876 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5877 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5878 \hrule
5879 \halign
5880 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5881 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5882 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5883 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5884 \noalign{\hrule}
5885 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5886 &highest&&&&&\cr
5887 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5888 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5889 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5890 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5891 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5892 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5893 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5894 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5895 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5896 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5897 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5898 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5899 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5900 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5901 \hrule}
5902 @end tex
5903 @iftex
5904 {
5905 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5906 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5907 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5908 }
5909 @end iftex
5910 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5911
5912 @node Evaluation
5913 @subsection Evaluation
5914 @cindex lazy evaluation
5915 @cindex expression evaluation order
5916 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5917 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5918
5919 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5920 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5921 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5922 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5923
5924 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5925 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5926 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5927 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5928
5929 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5930 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5931 allocation.
5932
5933 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5934 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5935
5936 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5937 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5938 following
5939 @smallexample
5940 @group
5941 SECTIONS
5942 @{
5943 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5944 @{ *(.text) @}
5945 @}
5946 @end group
5947 @end smallexample
5948 @noindent
5949 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5950 address}.
5951
5952 @node Expression Section
5953 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5954 @cindex expression sections
5955 @cindex absolute expressions
5956 @cindex relative expressions
5957 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5958 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5959 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5960 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5961 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5962 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5963 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5964 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5965 operations.
5966
5967 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5968 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5969 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5970 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5971 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5972 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5973 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5974 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5975 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5976 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5977 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5978 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5979 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5980 everywhere.
5981
5982 In the following simple example,
5983
5984 @smallexample
5985 @group
5986 SECTIONS
5987 @{
5988 . = 0x100;
5989 __executable_start = 0x100;
5990 .data :
5991 @{
5992 . = 0x10;
5993 __data_start = 0x10;
5994 *(.data)
5995 @}
5996 @dots{}
5997 @}
5998 @end group
5999 @end smallexample
6000
6001 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6002 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6003 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6004 section in the second two assignments.
6005
6006 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6007 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6008
6009 @itemize @bullet
6010 @item
6011 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6012 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6013 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6014 @item
6015 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6016 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6017 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6018 @item
6019 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6020 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6021 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6022 before applying the operator.
6023 @end itemize
6024
6025 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6026
6027 @itemize @bullet
6028 @item
6029 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6030 @item
6031 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6032 @item
6033 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6034 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6035 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6036 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6037 but an absolute address otherwise.
6038 @item
6039 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6040 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6041 section as the relative operand(s).
6042 @item
6043 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6044 conversions) is an absolute address.
6045 @end itemize
6046
6047 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6048 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6049 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6050 section @samp{.data}:
6051 @smallexample
6052 SECTIONS
6053 @{
6054 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6055 @}
6056 @end smallexample
6057 @noindent
6058 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6059 @samp{.data} section.
6060
6061 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6062 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6063
6064 @node Builtin Functions
6065 @subsection Builtin Functions
6066 @cindex functions in expressions
6067 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6068 use in linker script expressions.
6069
6070 @table @code
6071 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6072 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6073 @cindex expression, absolute
6074 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6075 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6076 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6077 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6078
6079 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6080 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6081 @cindex section address in expression
6082 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6083 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6084 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6085 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6086 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6087 the other two will be absolute:
6088 @smallexample
6089 @group
6090 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6091 .output1 :
6092 @{
6093 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6094 @dots{}
6095 @}
6096 .output :
6097 @{
6098 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6099 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6100 @}
6101 @dots{} @}
6102 @end group
6103 @end smallexample
6104
6105 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6106 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6107 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6108 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6109 @cindex round up location counter
6110 @cindex align location counter
6111 @cindex round up expression
6112 @cindex align expression
6113 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6114 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6115 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6116 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6117 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6118 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6119
6120 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6121 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6122 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6123 input sections:
6124 @smallexample
6125 @group
6126 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6127 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6128 *(.data)
6129 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6130 @}
6131 @dots{} @}
6132 @end group
6133 @end smallexample
6134 @noindent
6135 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6136 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6137 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6138 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6139
6140 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6141
6142 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6143 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6144 @cindex section alignment
6145 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6146 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6147 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6148 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6149 value in that section.
6150 @smallexample
6151 @group
6152 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6153 .output @{
6154 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6155 @dots{}
6156 @}
6157 @dots{} @}
6158 @end group
6159 @end smallexample
6160
6161 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6162 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6163 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6164 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6165 section.
6166
6167 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6168 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6169 This is equivalent to either
6170 @smallexample
6171 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6172 @end smallexample
6173 or
6174 @smallexample
6175 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6176 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6177 @end smallexample
6178 @noindent
6179 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6180 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6181 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6182 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6183 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6184 bytes in the on-disk file.
6185
6186 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6187 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6188 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6189 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6190 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6191
6192 @noindent
6193 Example:
6194 @smallexample
6195 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6196 @end smallexample
6197
6198 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6199 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6200 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6201 evaluation purposes.
6202
6203 @smallexample
6204 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6205 @end smallexample
6206
6207 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6208 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6209 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6210 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6211 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6212 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6213 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6214 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6215 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6216 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6217 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6218 section alignment.
6219
6220 @smallexample
6221 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6222 @end smallexample
6223
6224 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6225 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6226 @cindex symbol defaults
6227 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6228 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6229 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6230 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6231 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6232 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6233 existed, its value is preserved:
6234
6235 @smallexample
6236 @group
6237 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6238 .text : @{
6239 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6240 @dots{}
6241 @}
6242 @dots{}
6243 @}
6244 @end group
6245 @end smallexample
6246
6247 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6248 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6249 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6250
6251 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6252 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6253 @cindex section load address in expression
6254 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6255 Section LMA}).
6256
6257 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6258 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6259 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6260 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6261
6262 @kindex MAX
6263 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6264 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6265
6266 @kindex MIN
6267 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6268 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6269
6270 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6271 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6272 @cindex unallocated address, next
6273 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6274 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6275 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6276 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6277
6278 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6279 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6280 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6281
6282 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6283 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6284 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6285 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6286 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6287 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6288 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6289 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6290 name.
6291
6292 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6293 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6294 @cindex section size
6295 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6296 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6297 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6298 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6299 @smallexample
6300 @group
6301 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6302 .output @{
6303 .start = . ;
6304 @dots{}
6305 .end = . ;
6306 @}
6307 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6308 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6309 @dots{} @}
6310 @end group
6311 @end smallexample
6312
6313 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6314 @itemx sizeof_headers
6315 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6316 @cindex header size
6317 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6318 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6319 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6320 choose, to facilitate paging.
6321
6322 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6323 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6324 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6325 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6326 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6327 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6328 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6329 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6330 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6331 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6332 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6333 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6334 @end table
6335
6336 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6337 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6338 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6339 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6340 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6341 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6342 linker will report an error.
6343
6344 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6345
6346 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6347 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6348 commands.
6349
6350 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6351 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6352 read. This can affect archive searching.
6353
6354 @ifset GENERIC
6355 @node Machine Dependent
6356 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6357
6358 @cindex machine dependencies
6359 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6360 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6361 functionality are not listed.
6362
6363 @menu
6364 @ifset H8300
6365 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6366 @end ifset
6367 @ifset I960
6368 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6369 @end ifset
6370 @ifset M68HC11
6371 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6372 @end ifset
6373 @ifset ARM
6374 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6375 @end ifset
6376 @ifset HPPA
6377 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6378 @end ifset
6379 @ifset M68K
6380 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6381 @end ifset
6382 @ifset MIPS
6383 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6384 @end ifset
6385 @ifset MMIX
6386 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6387 @end ifset
6388 @ifset MSP430
6389 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6390 @end ifset
6391 @ifset NDS32
6392 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6393 @end ifset
6394 @ifset NIOSII
6395 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6396 @end ifset
6397 @ifset POWERPC
6398 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6399 @end ifset
6400 @ifset POWERPC64
6401 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6402 @end ifset
6403 @ifset SPU
6404 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6405 @end ifset
6406 @ifset TICOFF
6407 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6408 @end ifset
6409 @ifset WIN32
6410 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6411 @end ifset
6412 @ifset XTENSA
6413 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6414 @end ifset
6415 @end menu
6416 @end ifset
6417
6418 @ifset H8300
6419 @ifclear GENERIC
6420 @raisesections
6421 @end ifclear
6422
6423 @node H8/300
6424 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6425
6426 @cindex H8/300 support
6427 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6428 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6429
6430 @table @emph
6431 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6432 @item relaxing address modes
6433 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6434 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6435 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6436 respectively.
6437
6438 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6439 @item synthesizing instructions
6440 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6441 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6442 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6443 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6444 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6445 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6446 top page of memory).
6447
6448 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6449 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6450 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6451 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6452 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6453 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6454 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6455
6456 @item bit manipulation instructions
6457 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6458 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6459 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6460 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6461 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6462 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6463 the top page of memory).
6464
6465 @item system control instructions
6466 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6467 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6468 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6469 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6470 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6471 the top page of memory).
6472 @end table
6473
6474 @ifclear GENERIC
6475 @lowersections
6476 @end ifclear
6477 @end ifset
6478
6479 @ifclear GENERIC
6480 @ifset Renesas
6481 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6482 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6483 @node Renesas
6484 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6485
6486 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6487 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6488 options are required for these chips.
6489 @end ifset
6490 @end ifclear
6491
6492 @ifset I960
6493 @ifclear GENERIC
6494 @raisesections
6495 @end ifclear
6496
6497 @node i960
6498 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6499
6500 @cindex i960 support
6501
6502 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6503 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6504 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6505 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6506 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6507 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6508 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6509
6510 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6511 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6512 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6513 the names
6514
6515 @smallexample
6516 @group
6517 try
6518 libtry.a
6519 tryca
6520 libtryca.a
6521 @end group
6522 @end smallexample
6523
6524 @noindent
6525 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6526 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6527
6528 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6529 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6530 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6531 specifies a library.
6532
6533 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6534 @cindex relaxing on i960
6535 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6536 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6537 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6538 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6539 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6540 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6541 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6542 not itself call any subroutines).
6543
6544 @ifclear GENERIC
6545 @lowersections
6546 @end ifclear
6547 @end ifset
6548
6549 @ifset ARM
6550 @ifclear GENERIC
6551 @raisesections
6552 @end ifclear
6553
6554 @ifset M68HC11
6555 @ifclear GENERIC
6556 @raisesections
6557 @end ifclear
6558
6559 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6560 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6561
6562 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6563
6564 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6565
6566 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6567 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6568
6569 @table @emph
6570 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6571 @item relaxing address modes
6572 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6573 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6574 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6575 respectively.
6576
6577 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6578 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6579 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6580
6581 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6582 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6583 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6584 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6585 @code{bset} instructions.
6586
6587 @end table
6588
6589 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6590
6591 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6592 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6593 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6594 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6595 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6596 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6597 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6598 point to the function trampoline.
6599
6600 @ifclear GENERIC
6601 @lowersections
6602 @end ifclear
6603 @end ifset
6604
6605 @node ARM
6606 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6607
6608 @cindex ARM interworking support
6609 @kindex --support-old-code
6610 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6611 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6612 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6613 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6614 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6615 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6616 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6617 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6618 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6619 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6620
6621 @cindex thumb entry point
6622 @cindex entry point, thumb
6623 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6624 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6625 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6626 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6627 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6628 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6629
6630 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6631 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6632 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6633 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6634 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6635 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6636
6637 @cindex BE8
6638 @kindex --be8
6639 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6640 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6641 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6642 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6643 little-endian code.
6644
6645 @cindex TARGET1
6646 @kindex --target1-rel
6647 @kindex --target1-abs
6648 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6649 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6650 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6651 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6652
6653 @cindex TARGET2
6654 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6655 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6656 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6657 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6658 @table @samp
6659 @item rel
6660 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6661 @item abs
6662 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6663 @item got-rel
6664 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6665 @end table
6666
6667 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6668 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6669 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6670 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6671 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6672 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6673
6674 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6675 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6676 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6677
6678 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6679 relocations are ignored.
6680
6681 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6682 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6683 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6684 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6685
6686 @smallexample
6687 TST rM, #1
6688 MOVEQ PC, rM
6689 BX Rn
6690 @end smallexample
6691
6692 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6693 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6694 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6695
6696 @cindex USE_BLX
6697 @kindex --use-blx
6698 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6699 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6700 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6701 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6702 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6703
6704 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6705 specify it if you are using that target.
6706
6707 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6708 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6709 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6710 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6711 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6712 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6713 the support code can read the intended values.
6714
6715 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6716 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6717 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6718 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6719 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6720 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6721
6722 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6723 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6724 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6725 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6726 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6727 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6728
6729 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6730 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6731 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6732 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6733 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6734 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6735 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6736
6737 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6738 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6739 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6740 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6741 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6742 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6743 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6744
6745 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6746 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6747 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6748
6749 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6750 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6751
6752 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6753 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6754 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6755 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6756 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6757 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6758 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6759 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6760
6761 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6762 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6763
6764 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6765 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6766 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6767 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6768 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6769
6770 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6771 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6772 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6773 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6774 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6775 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6776
6777 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6778 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6779
6780 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6781 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6782 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6783 occurs.
6784
6785 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6786 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6787 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6788 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6789 occurs.
6790
6791 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6792 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6793 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6794 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6795 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6796 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6797 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6798 not be diagnosed.
6799
6800 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6801 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6802 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6803 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6804 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6805 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6806 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6807
6808 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6809 @kindex --pic-veneer
6810 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6811 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6812 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6813 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6814
6815 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6816 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6817 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6818 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6819 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6820 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6821 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6822 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6823 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6824 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6825 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6826 where they should be placed.
6827
6828 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6829 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6830 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6831 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6832 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6833 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6834 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6835 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6836 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6837 from the input sections.
6838
6839 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6840 @samp{N = +1}.
6841
6842 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6843 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6844 otherwise.
6845
6846 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6847 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6848 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6849 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6850
6851 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6852
6853 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6854 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6855 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6856 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6857
6858 Please contact ARM for further details.
6859
6860 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6861 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6862 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6863 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6864
6865 @kindex --long-plt
6866 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6867 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6868 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6869 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6870
6871 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6872 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
6873 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6874 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6875
6876 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
6877 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6878 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6879 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6880 veneers in memory.
6881
6882 @kindex --cmse-implib
6883 @cindex Secure gateway import library
6884 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6885 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6886 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6887 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6888
6889 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6890 @cindex Input import library
6891 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6892 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6893 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6894 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6895 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6896 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6897 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6898 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6899 specified.
6900
6901 @ifclear GENERIC
6902 @lowersections
6903 @end ifclear
6904 @end ifset
6905
6906 @ifset HPPA
6907 @ifclear GENERIC
6908 @raisesections
6909 @end ifclear
6910
6911 @node HPPA ELF32
6912 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6913 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6914 @kindex --multi-subspace
6915 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6916 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6917 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6918 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6919 multiple sub-spaces.
6920
6921 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6922 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6923 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6924 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6925 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6926 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6927 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6928 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6929 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6930 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6931 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6932 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6933 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6934 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6935 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6936 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6937
6938 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6939 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6940 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6941 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6942
6943 @ifclear GENERIC
6944 @lowersections
6945 @end ifclear
6946 @end ifset
6947
6948 @ifset M68K
6949 @ifclear GENERIC
6950 @raisesections
6951 @end ifclear
6952
6953 @node M68K
6954 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6955
6956 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6957 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6958 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6959 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6960 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6961 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6962 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6963 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6964 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6965 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6966 support such GOTs.
6967 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6968 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6969 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6970 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6971
6972 @ifclear GENERIC
6973 @lowersections
6974 @end ifclear
6975 @end ifset
6976
6977 @ifset MIPS
6978 @ifclear GENERIC
6979 @raisesections
6980 @end ifclear
6981
6982 @node MIPS
6983 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6984
6985 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6986 @kindex --insn32
6987 @kindex --no-insn32
6988 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6989 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6990 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6991 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6992 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6993 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6994
6995 @ifclear GENERIC
6996 @lowersections
6997 @end ifclear
6998 @end ifset
6999
7000 @ifset MMIX
7001 @ifclear GENERIC
7002 @raisesections
7003 @end ifclear
7004
7005 @node MMIX
7006 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7007 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7008 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7009 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7010 can translate between the two formats.
7011
7012 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7013 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7014 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7015 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7016 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7017 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7018 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7019 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7020
7021 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7022 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7023 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7024 of a section.
7025
7026 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7027 are left out from an mmo file.
7028
7029 @ifclear GENERIC
7030 @lowersections
7031 @end ifclear
7032 @end ifset
7033
7034 @ifset MSP430
7035 @ifclear GENERIC
7036 @raisesections
7037 @end ifclear
7038
7039 @node MSP430
7040 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7041 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7042 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7043 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7044
7045 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7046 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7047
7048 @table @code
7049 @item @samp{.vectors}
7050 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7051
7052 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7053 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7054 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7055
7056 @item @samp{.infomem}
7057 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7058 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7059
7060 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7061 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7062 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7063
7064 @item @samp{.noinit}
7065 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7066
7067 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7068 @end table
7069
7070 @ifclear GENERIC
7071 @lowersections
7072 @end ifclear
7073 @end ifset
7074
7075 @ifset NDS32
7076 @ifclear GENERIC
7077 @raisesections
7078 @end ifclear
7079
7080 @node NDS32
7081 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7082 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7083 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7084 relaxes objects according to these options.
7085
7086 @table @code
7087 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7088 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7089
7090 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7091 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7092
7093 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7094 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7095
7096 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7097 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7098
7099 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7100 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7101
7102 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7103 Update the existing EX9 table.
7104
7105 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7106 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7107
7108 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7109 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7110
7111 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7112 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7113
7114 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7115 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7116 @end table
7117
7118 @ifclear GENERIC
7119 @lowersections
7120 @end ifclear
7121 @end ifset
7122
7123 @ifset NIOSII
7124 @ifclear GENERIC
7125 @raisesections
7126 @end ifclear
7127
7128 @node Nios II
7129 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7130 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7131 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7132
7133 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7134 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7135 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7136 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7137 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7138 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7139 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7140 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7141 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7142 larger than 256MB.
7143
7144 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7145 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7146 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7147 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7148 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7149 register as a temporary.
7150
7151 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7152 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7153 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7154
7155 @ifclear GENERIC
7156 @lowersections
7157 @end ifclear
7158 @end ifset
7159
7160 @ifset POWERPC
7161 @ifclear GENERIC
7162 @raisesections
7163 @end ifclear
7164
7165 @node PowerPC ELF32
7166 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7167 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7168 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7169 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7170 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7171 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7172 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7173 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7174 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7175 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7176 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7177 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7178 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7179
7180 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7181 @table @option
7182 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7183 @kindex --bss-plt
7184 @item --bss-plt
7185 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7186 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7187 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7188 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7189 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7190 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7191 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7192 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7193
7194 @kindex --secure-plt
7195 @item --secure-plt
7196 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7197 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7198 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7199 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7200 style BSS PLT.
7201
7202 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7203 @kindex --sdata-got
7204 @item --sdata-got
7205 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7206 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7207 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7208 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7209 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7210 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7211 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7212 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7213 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7214 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7215 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7216 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7217
7218 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7219 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7220 @item --emit-stub-syms
7221 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7222 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7223
7224 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7225 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7226 @item --no-tls-optimize
7227 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7228 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7229 disable the optimization.
7230 @end table
7231
7232 @ifclear GENERIC
7233 @lowersections
7234 @end ifclear
7235 @end ifset
7236
7237 @ifset POWERPC64
7238 @ifclear GENERIC
7239 @raisesections
7240 @end ifclear
7241
7242 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7243 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7244
7245 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7246 @table @option
7247 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7248 @kindex --stub-group-size
7249 @item --stub-group-size
7250 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7251 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7252 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7253 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7254 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7255 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7256 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7257 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7258 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7259 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7260 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7261 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7262 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7263 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7264
7265 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7266 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7267 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7268 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7269
7270 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7271 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7272 @item --emit-stub-syms
7273 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7274 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7275
7276 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7277 @kindex --dotsyms
7278 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7279 @item --dotsyms
7280 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7281 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7282 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7283 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7284 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7285 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7286 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7287 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7288 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7289 feature.
7290
7291 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7292 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7293 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7294 @item --save-restore-funcs
7295 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7296 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7297 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7298 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7299 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7300 link.
7301
7302 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7303 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7304 @item --no-tls-optimize
7305 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7306 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7307 disable the optimization.
7308
7309 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7310 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7311 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7312 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7313 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7314 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7315 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7316 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7317 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7318 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7319 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7320 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7321 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7322 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7323 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7324
7325 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7326 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7327 @item --no-opd-optimize
7328 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7329 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7330 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7331 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7332
7333 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7334 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7335 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7336 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7337 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7338 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7339 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7340
7341 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7342 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7343 @item --no-toc-optimize
7344 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7345 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7346 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7347 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7348 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7349 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7350 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7351 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7352 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7353 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7354 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7355 optimization.
7356
7357 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7358 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7359 @item --no-multi-toc
7360 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7361 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7362 where TOC
7363 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7364 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7365 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7366 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7367 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7368 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7369 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7370 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7371
7372 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7373 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7374 @item --no-toc-sort
7375 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7376 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7377 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7378 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7379 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7380 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7381 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7382 off this feature.
7383
7384 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7385 @kindex --plt-align
7386 @kindex --no-plt-align
7387 @item --plt-align
7388 @itemx --no-plt-align
7389 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7390 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7391 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7392 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7393 stubs are packed tightly.
7394
7395 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7396 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7397 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7398 @item --plt-static-chain
7399 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7400 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7401 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7402 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7403
7404 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7405 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7406 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7407 @item --plt-thread-safe
7408 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7409 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7410 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7411 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7412 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7413 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7414 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7415 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7416 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7417 default behaviour.
7418 @end table
7419
7420 @ifclear GENERIC
7421 @lowersections
7422 @end ifclear
7423 @end ifset
7424
7425 @ifset SPU
7426 @ifclear GENERIC
7427 @raisesections
7428 @end ifclear
7429
7430 @node SPU ELF
7431 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7432
7433 @cindex SPU ELF options
7434 @table @option
7435
7436 @cindex SPU plugins
7437 @kindex --plugin
7438 @item --plugin
7439 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7440
7441 @cindex SPU overlays
7442 @kindex --no-overlays
7443 @item --no-overlays
7444 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7445 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7446 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7447 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7448
7449 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7450 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7451 @item --emit-stub-syms
7452 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7453 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7454
7455 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7456 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7457 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7458 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7459 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7460 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7461
7462 @cindex SPU local store size
7463 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7464 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7465 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7466 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7467 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7468
7469 @cindex SPU
7470 @kindex --stack-analysis
7471 @item --stack-analysis
7472 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7473 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7474 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7475 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7476 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7477 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7478 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7479 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7480 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7481 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7482 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7483 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7484 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7485 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7486 and calls will be given.
7487
7488 @cindex SPU
7489 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7490 @item --emit-stack-syms
7491 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7492 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7493 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7494 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7495 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7496 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7497 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7498 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7499 @end table
7500
7501 @ifclear GENERIC
7502 @lowersections
7503 @end ifclear
7504 @end ifset
7505
7506 @ifset TICOFF
7507 @ifclear GENERIC
7508 @raisesections
7509 @end ifclear
7510
7511 @node TI COFF
7512 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7513 @cindex TI COFF versions
7514 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7515 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7516 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7517 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7518 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7519 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7520
7521 @ifclear GENERIC
7522 @lowersections
7523 @end ifclear
7524 @end ifset
7525
7526 @ifset WIN32
7527 @ifclear GENERIC
7528 @raisesections
7529 @end ifclear
7530
7531 @node WIN32
7532 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7533
7534 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7535 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7536 command line options mentioned here.
7537
7538 @table @emph
7539 @cindex import libraries
7540 @item import libraries
7541 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7542 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7543 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7544 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7545 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7546 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7547
7548 @item exporting DLL symbols
7549 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7550 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7551
7552 @table @emph
7553 @item using auto-export functionality
7554 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7555 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7556 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7557
7558 @itemize
7559 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7560 @item --exclude-symbols
7561 @item --exclude-libs
7562 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7563 @item --version-script
7564 @end itemize
7565
7566 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7567 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7568 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7569 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7570 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7571 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7572 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7573 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7574
7575 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7576 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7577 if either of the following are true:
7578
7579 @itemize
7580 @item A DEF file is used.
7581 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7582 @end itemize
7583
7584 @item using a DEF file
7585 @cindex using a DEF file
7586 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7587 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7588 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7589 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7590 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7591
7592 @example
7593 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7594 @end example
7595
7596 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7597 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7598
7599 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7600
7601 @example
7602 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7603
7604 EXPORTS
7605 foo
7606 bar
7607 _bar = bar
7608 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7609 var1 DATA
7610 doo = foo == foo2
7611 eoo DATA == var1
7612 @end example
7613
7614 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7615 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7616 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7617 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7618 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7619 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7620 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7621 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7622 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7623
7624 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7625 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7626 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7627
7628 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7629 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7630 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7631 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7632
7633 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7634 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7635 non-default base address for the image.
7636
7637 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7638 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7639 filename specified on the command line.
7640
7641 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7642
7643 @example
7644 EXPORTS
7645 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7646 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7647 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7648 @end example
7649
7650 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7651 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7652 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7653 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7654 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7655 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7656 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7657
7658 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7659
7660 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7661 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7662 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7663 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7664 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7665
7666 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7667 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7668 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7669 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7670
7671 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7672 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7673 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7674 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7675 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7676 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7677 application will behave unexpectedly.
7678
7679 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7680 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7681 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7682 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7683 the DLL without an import library.
7684
7685 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7686 other DEF file statements
7687
7688 @cindex creating a DEF file
7689 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7690 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7691
7692 @item Using decorations
7693 @cindex Using decorations
7694 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7695 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7696 declared as:
7697
7698 @example
7699 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7700 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7701 @end example
7702
7703 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7704 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7705 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7706 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7707
7708 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7709 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7710 instead:
7711
7712 @example
7713 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7714 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7715 @end example
7716
7717 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7718 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7719 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7720 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7721 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7722 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7723 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7724 information.
7725 @end table
7726
7727 @cindex automatic data imports
7728 @item automatic data imports
7729 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7730 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7731 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7732 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7733 code to these platforms, especially for large
7734 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7735 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7736 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7737 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7738 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7739 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7740 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7741 trigger the feature's use.
7742
7743 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7744 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7745
7746 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7747 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7748
7749 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7750 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7751 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7752 below.
7753
7754 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7755 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7756 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7757 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7758 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7759 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7760 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7761 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7762 references.
7763
7764 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7765 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7766 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7767 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7768 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7769 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7770 run without error on an older system.
7771
7772 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7773 enabled as needed.
7774
7775 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7776 @item direct linking to a dll
7777 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7778 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7779 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7780 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7781 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7782 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7783 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7784 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7785 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7786 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7787
7788 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7789 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7790 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7791 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7792 select the dll instead of an import library.
7793
7794
7795 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7796 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7797
7798 @example
7799 libxxx.dll.a
7800 xxx.dll.a
7801 libxxx.a
7802 xxx.lib
7803 cygxxx.dll (*)
7804 libxxx.dll
7805 xxx.dll
7806 @end example
7807
7808 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7809
7810 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7811 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7812 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7813 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7814 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7815
7816 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7817 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7818 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7819 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7820 could coexist on the same machine.
7821
7822 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7823 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7824 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7825
7826 @example
7827 bin/
7828 cygxxx.dll
7829 lib/
7830 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7831 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7832 @end example
7833
7834 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7835 done two ways:
7836
7837 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7838 @example
7839 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7840 @end example
7841
7842 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7843 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7844 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7845 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7846
7847 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7848 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7849 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7850 making the app/dll.
7851
7852 @example
7853 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7854 @end example
7855
7856 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7857
7858 @example
7859 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7860 @end example
7861
7862 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7863 perfectly legal
7864
7865 @example
7866 bin/
7867 cygxxx-5.dll
7868 lib/
7869 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7870 @end example
7871
7872 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7873 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7874 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7875
7876 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7877 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7878
7879 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7880 work with auto-imported data.
7881
7882 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7883 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7884 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7885 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7886 possible to do this without an import lib.
7887
7888 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7889 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7890 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7891 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7892
7893 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7894 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7895 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7896 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7897 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7898 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7899 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7900
7901 @item symbol aliasing
7902 @table @emph
7903 @item adding additional names
7904 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7905 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7906 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7907 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7908 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7909
7910 @example
7911 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7912
7913 EXPORTS
7914 foo
7915 _foo = foo
7916 @end example
7917
7918 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7919
7920 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7921 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7922
7923 @example
7924 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7925 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7926 @end example
7927
7928 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7929 symbols.
7930
7931 @item renaming symbols
7932 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7933 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7934 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7935 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7936 created). In the following example:
7937
7938 @example
7939 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7940
7941 EXPORTS
7942 _foo = foo
7943 @end example
7944
7945 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7946 @samp{_foo}.
7947 @end table
7948
7949 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7950 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7951 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7952 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7953 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7954 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7955 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7956 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7957 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7958 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7959 which is probably not what you wanted.
7960
7961 @cindex weak externals
7962 @item weak externals
7963 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7964 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7965 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7966 are three variants of weak externals:
7967 @itemize
7968 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7969 called lazy externals.
7970 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7971 This form is not presently implemented.
7972 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7973 implemented.
7974 @end itemize
7975 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7976 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7977 uses a default value.
7978
7979 @cindex aligned common symbols
7980 @item aligned common symbols
7981 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7982 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7983 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7984 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7985 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7986 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7987 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7988 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7989
7990 @end table
7991
7992 @ifclear GENERIC
7993 @lowersections
7994 @end ifclear
7995 @end ifset
7996
7997 @ifset XTENSA
7998 @ifclear GENERIC
7999 @raisesections
8000 @end ifclear
8001
8002 @node Xtensa
8003 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8004
8005 @cindex Xtensa processors
8006 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8007 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8008 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8009 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8010 example, with the command:
8011
8012 @smallexample
8013 SECTIONS
8014 @{
8015 .text : @{
8016 *(.literal .text)
8017 @}
8018 @}
8019 @end smallexample
8020
8021 @noindent
8022 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8023 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8024 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8025 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8026 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8027 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8028 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8029
8030 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8031 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8032 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8033 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8034 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8035 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8036 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8037 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8038 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8039 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8040 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8041 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8042
8043 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8044 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8045 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8046 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8047 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8048 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8049 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8050 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8051 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8052 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8053 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8054 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8055 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8056 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8057
8058 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8059 control the linker:
8060
8061 @cindex Xtensa options
8062 @table @option
8063 @item --size-opt
8064 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8065 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8066 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8067 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8068 preserve the correctness of the code.
8069 @end table
8070
8071 @ifclear GENERIC
8072 @lowersections
8073 @end ifclear
8074 @end ifset
8075
8076 @ifclear SingleFormat
8077 @node BFD
8078 @chapter BFD
8079
8080 @cindex back end
8081 @cindex object file management
8082 @cindex object formats available
8083 @kindex objdump -i
8084 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8085 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8086 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8087 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8088 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8089 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8090 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8091 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8092 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8093
8094 @cindex BFD requirements
8095 @cindex requirements for BFD
8096 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8097 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8098 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8099 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8100 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8101 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8102 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8103
8104 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8105 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8106 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8107 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8108
8109 @menu
8110 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8111 @end menu
8112
8113 @node BFD outline
8114 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8115 @cindex opening object files
8116 @include bfdsumm.texi
8117 @end ifclear
8118
8119 @node Reporting Bugs
8120 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8121 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8122 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8123
8124 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8125
8126 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8127 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8128 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8129 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8130 @command{ld}.
8131
8132 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8133 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8134
8135 @menu
8136 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8137 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8138 @end menu
8139
8140 @node Bug Criteria
8141 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8142 @cindex bug criteria
8143
8144 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8145
8146 @itemize @bullet
8147 @cindex fatal signal
8148 @cindex linker crash
8149 @cindex crash of linker
8150 @item
8151 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8152 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8153
8154 @cindex error on valid input
8155 @item
8156 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8157
8158 @cindex invalid input
8159 @item
8160 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8161 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8162 object files are correct.
8163
8164 @item
8165 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8166 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8167 @end itemize
8168
8169 @node Bug Reporting
8170 @section How to Report Bugs
8171 @cindex bug reports
8172 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8173
8174 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8175 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8176 recommend you contact that organization first.
8177
8178 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8179 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8180 distribution.
8181
8182 @ifset BUGURL
8183 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8184 @value{BUGURL}.
8185 @end ifset
8186
8187 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8188 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8189 fact or leave it out, state it!
8190
8191 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8192 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8193 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8194 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8195 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8196 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8197 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8198 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8199 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8200 and the most helpful.
8201
8202 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8203 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8204 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8205
8206 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8207 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8208 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8209 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8210
8211 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8212
8213 @itemize @bullet
8214 @item
8215 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8216 the @samp{--version} argument.
8217
8218 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8219 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8220
8221 @item
8222 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8223 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8224
8225 @item
8226 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8227 version number.
8228
8229 @item
8230 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8231 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8232
8233 @item
8234 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8235 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8236 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8237 sufficient.
8238
8239 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8240 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8241
8242 @item
8243 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8244 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8245 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8246 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8247 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8248 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8249 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8250 attachments are best.
8251
8252 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8253 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8254 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8255 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8256 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8257
8258 @item
8259 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8260 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8261
8262 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8263 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8264 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8265 a chance to make a mistake.
8266
8267 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8268 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8269 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8270 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8271 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8272 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8273 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8274 any conclusion from our observations.
8275
8276 @item
8277 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8278 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8279 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8280 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8281 context, not by line number.
8282
8283 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8284 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8285 @end itemize
8286
8287 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8288
8289 @itemize @bullet
8290 @item
8291 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8292
8293 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8294 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8295 changes will not affect it.
8296
8297 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8298 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8299 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8300 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8301
8302 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8303 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8304 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8305 less time, and so on.
8306
8307 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8308 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8309
8310 @item
8311 A patch for the bug.
8312
8313 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8314 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8315 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8316 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8317
8318 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8319 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8320 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8321 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8322 fixed.
8323
8324 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8325 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8326 help us to understand.
8327
8328 @item
8329 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8330
8331 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8332 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8333 @end itemize
8334
8335 @node MRI
8336 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8337 @cindex MRI compatibility
8338 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8339 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8340 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8341 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8342 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8343 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8344 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8345
8346 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8347 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8348 features to make use of them.
8349
8350 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8351 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8352
8353 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8354 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8355 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8356 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8357 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8358
8359 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8360
8361 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8362 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8363 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8364
8365 @table @code
8366 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8367 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8368 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8369 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8370 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8371 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8372 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8373 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8374 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8375 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8376 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8377
8378 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8379 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8380 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8381 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8382
8383 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8384
8385 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8386 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8387 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8388 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8389
8390 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8391 @item BASE @var{expression}
8392 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8393 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8394
8395 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8396 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8397 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8398 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8399
8400 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8401 @item END
8402 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8403
8404 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8405 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8406 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8407 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8408
8409 @enumerate
8410 @item
8411 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8412
8413 @item
8414 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8415
8416 @item
8417 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8418 @samp{COFF}
8419 @end enumerate
8420
8421 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8422 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8423 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8424 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8425
8426 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8427 same line, with no change in its effect.
8428
8429 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8430 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8431 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8432 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8433 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8434 command line.
8435
8436 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8437 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8438 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8439 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8440 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8441
8442 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8443 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8444 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8445 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8446 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8447 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8448 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8449 file, in the order specified.
8450
8451 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8452 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8453 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8454 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8455 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8456 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8457
8458 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8459 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8460 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8461 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8462 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8463 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8464 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8465 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8466 @end table
8467
8468 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8469 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8470 @include fdl.texi
8471
8472 @node LD Index
8473 @unnumbered LD Index
8474
8475 @printindex cp
8476
8477 @tex
8478 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8479 % meantime:
8480 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8481 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8482 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8483 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8484 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8485 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8486 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8487 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8488 \page\colophon
8489 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8490 @end tex
8491
8492 @bye
This page took 0.197103 seconds and 3 git commands to generate.